<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ik2ncj</id>
	<title>DXLog.net - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ik2ncj"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Ik2ncj"/>
	<updated>2026-04-04T09:35:29Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.45.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Options&amp;diff=1152</id>
		<title>Menu Options</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Options&amp;diff=1152"/>
		<updated>2016-11-20T19:16:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Load contest at startup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked last opened log will be opened automatically when DXLog.net is started.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disabled&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, DXlog.net is started but no log is opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatic backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clicked, this will open the log automatic backup settings window. Here parameters for log automatic backup can be set according to the user&#039;s preference.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:auto_backup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Language==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the log language. The languages available are English, Croatian, Italian, and Norwegian.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard selector==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows the assignment of a different keyboard to each entry line. You (obviously) must have more than one keyboard connected to the PC to use this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Options -&amp;gt; Keyboard selector. A form opens showing the current keyboard assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Keyboard_select_default.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on Define. A popup will appear asking you to identify the Radio 1 keyboard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Keyboard_select_keyboard_1.png‎]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This keyboard will be assigned to the Radio 1 (upper) log entry line. Press any key on keyboard 1. Now press any key on the keyboard to be assigned to the Radio 2 (lower) entry line. If successful, the form will show some cryptic identifiers for the keyboards. If you really do have separate keyboards ensure that the identifiers are different. It is possible to use one keyboard and assign it to both positions, which will show as the same identifier for both Radio 1 and Radio 2. The form should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Keyboard_select_success.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now click OK to save your assignments and close the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you find that something doesn&#039;t work or need to reset to the default Any Keyboard configuration, open the Keyboard selector form and select the Reset button. Click OK and any previous keyboard assignments will be removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW/DIGI==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;No sound&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SOUND / NOSOUND&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CW monitor sound.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If smart keyer (WinKey) is configured on any of interfaces, this function is disabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable different R1/R2 speed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, different CW speed can be set for Radio 1 and Radio 2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Decrease&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F9&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Decrease active radio CW speed by 2 WPM. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Decrease other&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+F9&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Decrease inactive radio CW speed by 2 WPM. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Increase&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Increase active radio CW speed by 2 WPM. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Increase other&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
  Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Increase inactive radio CW speed by 2 WPM. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Modify standard messages&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MESSAGES / MSGS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is used to edit the contents of all standard F, INS and PLUS messages for RUN and S&amp;amp;P mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:standard_messages_cw.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Edited content is saved in currently opened DXLog.net contest file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:standard_messages_options.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Options tab allows you to set additional message options:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &#039;&#039;&#039;$QSOB4 macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   This text will be sent if $QSOB4 macro is activated in case of dupe qso&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &#039;&#039;&#039;Only use RUN messages&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   DXLog.net will use only RUN messages, even if you switch mode to Search &amp;amp; Pounce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &#039;&#039;&#039;Sprint Exchange Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   This setting is applicable only for contests where Sprint Exchange Logic is enabled in config file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   When this option is checked, if the operator presses the INSERT key, DXLog.net will send the INS message in RUN mode if the &lt;br /&gt;
   received serial number field is empty. Otherwise, DXLog.net will only send the INS message in Search &amp;amp; Pounce mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Modify additional messages&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+C&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can edit additional CW messages which can be called in a F key macro using $MSG1..12.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:othercwdigi.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Content of additional messages are saved in the DXLog.net config file. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serial number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose serial number abbreviation type when sending serial number during the contest.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Possible options are:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Leading zeros&#039;&#039; When checked leading zeros are sent (for example 001 instead of 1).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Not abbreviated&#039;&#039; When checked all numbers are sent without any abbreviation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Half abbreviated&#039;&#039; When checked all number &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; are replaced with the character &#039;&#039;&#039;T&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Abbreviated&#039;&#039; When checked all numbers &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;9&#039;&#039;&#039; are replaced with the characters &#039;&#039;&#039;T&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039; when checked all numbers &#039;&#039;&#039;0, 1, 4, 5&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;9&#039;&#039;&#039; are replaced with characters &#039;&#039;&#039;T, A, V, E&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Shortened spaces (CT spaces)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, shortened spaces will be activated (CT style).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Remap keys in keyboard mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, keyboard remapping will be active when sending CW/RTTY text in keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Work dupes&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, QSOB4 message wouldn&#039;t be sent if qso is a dupe.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Speed limits&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to set cw speed limits (fastest and slowest cw speed which can be selected). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add spacing when stacking messages&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When stacking messages during CW/RTTY contest (pressing for example F5 and F2 keys), if this option is checked one space character will be added between this each message added in the message buffer. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use smart double buffer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If Winkey is attached, this option sends 2 characters to the Winkey before waiting for a response, so DXL is always a character ahead of the attached Winkey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable winkey speed pot&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If winkey is attached, this option allows the winkey pot to be used to control CW speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto sending&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled and the mode is CW, DXL will autosend the INSERT message after 3 or 4 characters of the callsign have been typed into the log callsign entry field removing the need to press the insert key during a QSO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  For example, you&#039;re operating in run mode..&lt;br /&gt;
  F1 - CQ TEST G2F G2F&lt;br /&gt;
  Now 9A5K is calling you..&lt;br /&gt;
  You&#039;re typing in callsign field: 9A5 ... as you&#039;ve typed &amp;quot;5&amp;quot;, DXLog starts the INSERT message. in meantime you press K completing the&lt;br /&gt;
  callsign..  So DXL will send 9A5K 5NN 001 without pressing the insert key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable smart correction&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, DXLog will send only the part of the callsign that was corrected. Example: if you correct W6ABB to W6ABC, only ABC will be sent in reponse to the $CORRECT macro (instead of sending the entire callsign).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure interfaces==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DXL_port_config.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DXLog.net currently supports interfaces for up to 8 COM ports and one LPT port.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To use any of the ports to connect to the hardware and perform some of the functions, you must enable the port by checking &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot; box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In serial port section, you can select any COM port in range COM1 to COM20.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The only restriction is that you can&#039;t select same COM port for more than one interface.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In each serial port interface you can select appropriate device type in combo box in same row.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each device has additional parameters for setting. You can change them by clicking on Setup button for each interface.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Voice keyer section allows the PC sound adapter to be used to record and play back DVK messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use a printer port (LPT), you must enable it by checking &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot; box in printer port group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Additional data for printer port are configured by clicking Setup in printer port group.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dxl_printer_port_config.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Radio configuration&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Radio_setup_form.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a COM port is configured as a radio interface, click on &#039;Setup&#039; to open the Radio Setup form. In addition to the generic settings, several radio specific options are available.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Always use radio DATA mode for any DIGI mode&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: If your radio has a DATA mode for RTTY/PSK/AFSK, checking this option will force the DATA mode whenever a DIGI mode is selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Don&#039;t poll radio during TX&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: stop polling radio (stop updating frequency, etc.) during transmit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Reinitialize port after switching between TX and RX&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: Upon return to receive, reinitialize the COM port attached to that radio.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These last two options may be useful in cases where RF feedback are causing strange things to happen to a radio. If these options seem to clear up control problems, you may want to investigate adding bonding between the computer and radio(s), and addition of ferrite suppression devices to cables.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Interface specific options==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow different TX/RX antenna&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked this option allows different selection for TX and RX antenna with Operating-&amp;gt;Antenna selection menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use decoder freq correction&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked and audio decoder is used in digi mode contest, audio frequency in decoder will be added/decreased to cat frequency to get exact frequency for station.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Prevent TX if another radio on the same band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked the Transmitter connected to this DXlog.net will have it&#039;s TX disabled if another radio on the network is on the same band.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use Split command in SO2V technique &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked (and the technique selected is SO2V) DXLog will send the Split command to change the transmit VFO. Select this if you are using an Elecraft K3 for SO2V.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use different bandmap background for active radio &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, the background color of radio 1 or radio 2 bandmap will be changed when the radio becomes active. Note: the color used in this&lt;br /&gt;
mode needs to be selected by using the Colors menu in the bandmap right click menu. By default it is set to the same color as the normal&lt;br /&gt;
background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Round frequency to nearest kHz when sending from macro &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, the frequency sent by the $FREQS, $FREQP, and $FREQnn macros will be rounded to the nearest kHz. If not checked, the frequency is rounded to the nearest 100 Hz. An &#039;R&#039; is sent between the kHz and 100 Hz digits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Radio 1 Transverter Offset / Radio 2 Transverter Offset &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Checking either of these selections will open a form that allows you to enter the frequency offset of (usually) the VHF/UHF transverter. Frequency displays will be offset by this value, which can be positive or negative. Note: the resulting frequency must be a frequency in a valid band as defined in the contest configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039; Automatically open/close digital window on mode change &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, the digital window for the active radio will be opened when a digital mode is selected. If a non-digital mode is selected and the digital window is open, it will be closed. Note that the contest configuration must allow both digital and non-digital modes in the same time period (mixed mode). The digital window must be configured properly in the RTTY configuration form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==RTTY configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings for RTTY decoder types and paths to decoders&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:rtty_conf1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Upto 2 decoders can be utilised per audio channel (radio), set the path to each decoder, decoders must be in different folders on the PC hard disk.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MMVARI Multimode&#039;&#039;&#039; - For MMVARI select MMVARI from the radio buttons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MMTTY RTTY engine&#039;&#039;&#039; - For MMTTY goto http://hamsoft.ca/pages/mmtty.php - download MMTTY engine and extract into a folder on your PC hard disk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;2Tone RTTY engine&#039;&#039;&#039; - For 2TONE goto http://www.rttycontesting.com/downloads/2tone/ - download the latest 2tone version and extract into a folder on your hard disk&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;GRITTY RTTY Decoder&#039;&#039;&#039; - To use VE3NEA&#039;s GRITTY decoder then select the tickbox, GRITTY must be installed and running, GRITTY uses it&#039;s own decode window, simply click on the callsign required in the GRITTY decode screen and it will be transfered to DXLog callsign input line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the radio buttons for the correct RTTY decoder engine&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set the paths to the relevant RTTY decoder engines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set tick box options as appropriate for your operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MK2R/MK2R+/u2R configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Settings for integration with Microham type SO2R controllers&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:mk2r.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==OTRSP device pin Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OTRSP pin setup window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:OTRSP_Setup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rotator Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DXLog supports rotator control using UDP communications to PSTRotator by YO3DMU and the EA4TX rotator controller. Configuration steps are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Options -&amp;gt; Rotator Configuration from the Option menu. The configuration form will open:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:PSTRotator DXLog config2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the &amp;quot;Enable Rotator communication&amp;quot; box at the top of the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the required data in each column. Use the Add, Edit, and Delete buttons as required. Here are descriptions of each column:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Band: Value in meters for which this rotator is active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ant #: The number of the antenna for this band turned by this rotator, beginning at 1. Antennas are numbered in the order shown on the Radio/Ant Status Window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IP Address: If you are running PSTRotator or EA4TX on the same machine as DXLog, enter 127.0.0.1. Otherwise enter the IP address of the rotator control server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port: The UDP port used to communicate with the rotator interface. Normally PSTRotator uses 12040 for the first rotator, 12041 for the second, etc. However, any port that is free can be used. Write down the ports used as they are needed for PSTRotator or EA4TX configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send freq: Check this box if you need the radio frequency to be sent to PSTRotator. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the rotator software type from the drop down list, currently either PSTrotator or EA4TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When completed, press OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure PSTRotator, you may need to refer to the PSTRotator manual. Here are the basic steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the PSTRotator menu bar, Select Setup -&amp;gt; Trackers Setup -&amp;gt; DXLog.net/UR5EQF/LogHX Setup...  The Setup form will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rotator_tracker_setup_DXLog.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the port number used for this rotator in the Ethernet box. Select &#039;Azimuth&#039; in the &amp;quot;Tracking by&amp;quot; box. Click Save Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Tracker -&amp;gt; DXLog.net from the PSTRotator menu bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the main display, select &#039;Tracking&#039; from the Mode box. Depending on the view you have selected, you may need to select View -&amp;gt; Full View to see the Mode box. The following shows the location of the Mode box in PSTRotator:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:PSTRotator_tracking_mode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have more than one rotator, repeat the steps on each instance of PSTRotator, using the appropriate UDP Port number. See the PSTRotator documentation to enable multiple instances of PSTRotator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have everything configured, return to DXLog. Ensure you are on the appropriate band (and the proper antenna selected). Enter a callsign or an azimuth value into the callsign field. Press Ctrl-F12. DXLog will show the value sent on the status line, and PSTRotator will (hopefully) rotate to the selected azimuth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a callsign and press Alt-F12. Rotator will move to the long path azimuth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This completes Rotator configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configure network==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:network_params.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This form allows configuration of network addresses and identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Station ID:  The name of this instance of DXLog.net that will be shown on the Status window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server/Client IP: These entries define the server or client IP addresses. The client entry may be a fully qualified domain name of the server, limited to 100 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start number server: To allow usage of the number server (which allows reservation of serial numbers per station), check this box. Note: to enable the usage of the number server, it must be enabled using Options -&amp;gt; Networking -&amp;gt; Use number server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Network is enabled==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or Disable networking feature&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:neton.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  text command : NETON / NETOFF or NET / NONET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Networking==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Options_networking_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Synchronize CW messages&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initiate CW message synchronization to all network connected DXlog.net PC&#039;s.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t log QSO on this PC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, QSO cannot be added to the log at this PC.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instead, the callsign entered into the log entry callsign field will be added to the bandmap and the log entry callsign field will be cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usually used for Partner mode or operator training.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Software interlock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:interlock_options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, software interlock will be active.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transmit is only possible if the other networked DXlog.net station&#039;s with network id selected during interlock activation &#039;&#039;&#039;is not&#039;&#039;&#039; transmitting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Current blocking status is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Interlock scenario depends on Interlock option selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Interlock options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These options are effective when software interlock is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;&#039;First one wins&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  The First station which request a TX block via the network is able to Transmit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  All other stations have to wait for the Transmitting station to stop transmitting and for the local DXlog.net to receive the TX unblock&lt;br /&gt;
  message via the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;&#039;Last one wins&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Last station which request block goes on TX but only when the unblocking request is successful.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  If your station is blocked by other one, your DXlog.net will send a unblock request to the blocking stations DXlog.net via the network.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Only after your stations DXlog.net receives the unblock confirmation from the blocking station will a block request be sent to all other&lt;br /&gt;
  stations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  When your stations DXlog.net receives confirmation of a successful block request from all other networked stations,then your station will&lt;br /&gt;
  be switched to TX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;&#039;Last one wins if msg not&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Last one wins if msg is&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  These two options operate in the same way as the &#039;&#039;Last one wins&#039;&#039; option, but they must meet the additional condition defined in  &#039;&#039;If msg&lt;br /&gt;
  is/not selection&#039;&#039; option.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  For example: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  If the &#039;&#039;Last one wins if msg is&#039;&#039; option is selected and the &#039;&#039;F1&#039;&#039; submenu option in &#039;&#039;If msg is/not selection&#039;&#039; menu is checked. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  Your station will be blocked by the F1 message from another DXlog.net station in the network (this usually means that the other station is&lt;br /&gt;
  calling CQ), then your DXlog.net&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; can request an unblock from the CQ station, once the unblock has been accepted your DXlog.net will send&lt;br /&gt;
  a block command via the network and switch to TX.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  If your station is blocked by any other message except F1, your unblock request will be discarded and your station will have to wait for the&lt;br /&gt;
  blocking station&lt;br /&gt;
  to finish transmitting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &#039;&#039;If msg is/not selection&#039;&#039; options are:-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  F1-F7, INS, PLUS, KEYB, MAN Message selections for conditional &#039;&#039;Last one wins&#039;&#039; interlock scenarios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  F1-F7, INS, PLUS are standard messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  KEYB - TX in keyboard mode. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  MAN - manual TX request (usually with footswitch). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Computer DB9 Serial port footswitch information&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Important:- For the software interlock to work in SSB mode, each stations foot switch must be connected to that stations DXlog.net PC serial port using the following connections:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Connect a 10k resistor between DB9 pin 6 and pin 7.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; In &#039;&#039;&#039;OPTIONS - CONFIGURE INTERFACES&#039;&#039;&#039; Set DTR, pin 4 to &amp;quot;Always On&amp;quot; and RTS, pin 7 &lt;br /&gt;
  to &amp;quot;Always Off&amp;quot; for the relevant SERIAL port.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Connect the footswitch between DB9 pins 4 and pin 6.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  The footswitch must not be referenced or connected to ground.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  The Radio must be connected to the DXlog.net PC via RS232 with options &#039;&#039;&#039;use CAT PTT command on Phone&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Foot switch (pin 6)&#039;&#039;&#039; set &lt;br /&gt;
  to &#039;&#039;&#039;PTT&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  [[image:k3_settings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use number server&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When checked, the DXlog.net number server will be used to determine/reserve next serial number.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
One DXlog.net station must be set as the number server, in the &#039;&#039;&#039;configure network&#039;&#039;&#039; menu, this is usually the main run station.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is usable in multi op environment when serial numbers must be sent in sequential order (eg CQWW WPX M/S Category).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number reservation is made when the spacebar is pressed in log callsign entry field.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If successful, user will be notified in main status window that the number has been reserved.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
if a number is reserved but the qso isn&#039;t made, number reservation is cancelled when Wipe qso command is entered (ALT+W / F11 shortcuts).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Note: if you are using the number server on a single computer (for SO2R) you do not need to enable&lt;br /&gt;
the server/client selections. Ensure that the &amp;quot;Start server&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Connect as client&amp;quot; checkboxes&lt;br /&gt;
are not selected. Simply check the &amp;quot;Start number server&amp;quot; box on the Configure Network&lt;br /&gt;
form and ensure that &amp;quot;UDP network broadcast&amp;quot; is enabled and configured with the broadcast address&lt;br /&gt;
for your computer&#039;s particular network setup. Selecting the &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; button will calculate the &lt;br /&gt;
proper broadcast address for you.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t allow QSO logging if number isn&#039;t reserved&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
When using the serial number server, QSO logging will be prevented if a serial number is not reserved from the number server.&lt;br /&gt;
Also, when the number server is used and the reservation process has started, DXLog.net will show the active QSO NR as 000 until the new&lt;br /&gt;
reserved number is successfully received or the reservation is canceled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;The following are only relevant when 10 min band change rule is used in a contest (EG CQWW MS)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t allow QSO logging if band change rule is broken&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When operating a contest in a Multi transceiver environment, this option will prevent the contest band change rule being broken by stopping the mult station logging a QSO if the band change quantity has been exceeded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show different active QSO line colour during wait status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When operating a contest in a Multi transceiver environment, this option will change the color of the active log so entry line when the band change rule is violated.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  E.G. You make qso on the mult radio on 40m band at 00:00Z..&lt;br /&gt;
  In that case, you have to stay with mult station on 40m until 00:10Z when you are then allowed to QSY to other band with the mult station.&lt;br /&gt;
  If you do it earlier, or you have multiple mult stations, each of them will see the qso line in a different color until the 10 minutes has&lt;br /&gt;
  expired. By default the colour is red, until last minute when it changes to yellow... and after that it reverts back to the normal background&lt;br /&gt;
  color of the logging screen.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
  In multi/single environment it is very useful for each operator to see if a qso is allowed on that band or not. It&#039;s easy, you just have to &lt;br /&gt;
  look at the screen, and if the log entry line is red in color, you aren not allowed to make a qso. There are also timers visable in Status&lt;br /&gt;
  window, when a QSY is allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t allow QSO logging if operator isn&#039;t logged&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, logging is blocked if operator has not logged on.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show QSY notification in QSY Wizard&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, QSY notification will be shown in the QSY Wizard window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Use optimistic interlock blocking method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
When software interlock is used, if blocking allowed response isn&#039;t received from all stations requested for blocking before timeout, we assume that other stations are blocked and TX is allowed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
Dx Cluster telnet settings and options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dxcluster.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tick &#039;&#039;&#039;Reconnected default DXC at start&#039;&#039;&#039; to auto connect to DX Cluster on loading or creating a new log.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select edit connection list to add, delete or update the telnet DXCluster connection settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:DXC_list.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When editing or adding a new connection, give the connection a meaningful name and enter the address, either a Ip address or domain name, and the access port for the telnet connection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:DXC_def.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set a default DX cluster connecton, select the connection from the list and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HamCAP==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:hamcap_options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hamcap and VOCAP must be installed for these options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Download HAMcap from http://www.dxatlas.com/Download.asp and install&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  Download VOACAP from this web site: http://www.greg-hand.com and install&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HAMcap is a HF propagation prediction tool and is useful for contest strategy and watching for possible openings for multipliers. VOCAP works in the background supplying HAMcap with the data it requires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HAMcap options are:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;In background&#039;&#039;&#039; - this runs HAMcap in the background of DXlog.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tab&#039;&#039;&#039; - use this option to set which TAB of HAMcap is displayed when called by DXlog.net CTRL-P command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable automatic HAMcap prediction by pressing SPACEBAR go to Options-&amp;gt; Networking-&amp;gt; Show QSY notification in QSY Wizard menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will work after you insert a call-sign in call field and spacebar is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data files==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu is used to update the SCP and Country files from the internet and set Extra info and Prefill data base options.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Options_data_files_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We recommend updating the Country Files and SCP database before every contest&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*  &#039;&#039;&#039;Country files&#039;&#039;&#039; This command will open following window:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dxl_country_files.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can choose which of the country files you will use for calculation of DXCC, CQ zone, ITU zone etc. in the currently selected contest.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click on &#039;&#039;&#039;Download&#039;&#039;&#039; to update selected country file from the internet and click OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After clicking OK, DXLog.net will ask you to reload the currently active log in order to refresh all calculations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Super check partials &amp;gt; Update&#039;&#039;&#039;, this command will update the Super check partials master.scp database to the latest version from the internet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
on successful download and update you will be ask to restart DXlog.net, this must be done to reload the master.scp database into DXlog.net.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:master.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Update database&#039;&#039;&#039; Clicking this will update your local prefill database from currently opened log.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Extra info plugins &amp;gt; HAMqth&#039;&#039;&#039; Enable or Disable, If enabled then a valid Username and Password must be set in the configuration window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:HAMqth_conf.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Prefill database settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Prefill_database_settings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single or multiple prefill database(s) may be configured using this form. Settings here override any Prefill database that is defined in the contest configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure a prefill database, click &#039;Browse&#039; and select the database. Indicate the type of database using the pull down menu. Native DXLog.net prefill database files are type &#039;txt&#039;. N1MM+ Logger database files are type &#039;csv&#039;. WinTest database files are type &#039;dtb&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The prefill data is placed in the log line according to the selections in the &#039;Rcvd&#039;, &#039;RecInfo1&#039;, &#039;RecInfo2&#039;, and &#039;RecInfo3&#039; settings. &#039;1&#039; is the first column of data, &#039;2&#039; is the second, etc. If you do not wish to prefill a particular entry field, select &#039;-1&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log display options &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Options_log_menu.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Fonts&#039;&#039;&#039; - Increase or decrease the size of the log font.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Headers&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enable or disable log column headers.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide QSO numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; - Hide QSO numbers from Log, Useful in contests where serial numbers are not required to be sent.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Always show mode in QSO line&#039;&#039;&#039; - Show or hide mode in Log, enable for multimode contests.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show date in QSO lines&#039;&#039;&#039; - Show date in QSO lines. This data is read only in the log line.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show frequency in QSO lines&#039;&#039;&#039; - Show the actual frequency in the log line in addition to the band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show operator name in QSO lines&#039;&#039;&#039; - Show the currently logged on operator name in the QSO lines.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Colors&#039;&#039;&#039; - Edit log background and text colors.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Stay in field when moving up and down log&#039;&#039;&#039; - When editing log this option keeps the cursor in the same log field when moving up through the QSO&#039;s.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;In SO2R(V) use different background color&#039;&#039;&#039; - Use a different background color in Radio 1/Radio 2 (VFO 1/VFO 2) entry lines. The background color of the Radio 1/Radio 2 log line will be changed when the radio becomes active. The specific color must be configured in the Log window &#039;&#039;&#039;Colors&#039;&#039;&#039; menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Windows==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two different way how DXLog.net handles child windows opened during the contest.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By default, all child windows are opened inside main window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to use dual monitors, you should enable Floating windows option.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In that case all child windows will be opened outside of main window and you can easily drag &amp;amp; drop them to desired position (for example on second monitor). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Toolbar==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or Disable DXlog.net toolbar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:toolbar.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restore windows positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option brings all windows back to the software default positions, useful if a window has been lost in a multi screen environment.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=297</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=297"/>
		<updated>2014-12-25T21:01:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Data entry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REDEFINE KEYBOARD KEYS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a DXL command to any of the keys (or combination of keys) just using this feature. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the redefine window is opened just select from keyboard the new key (or combination) you want to have and then type the old key (or combination) that has the default DXL assigned command you want to move. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now DXL behave is the same as before but using different key(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field (not valid for serial #).&lt;br /&gt;
   *Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;PRESSING THE SPACE BAR&amp;quot; the report field is completed when you press the spacebar.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
   *Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AUTOMATICALLY&amp;quot; the report field is completed while you are typing the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   *After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AFTER TIMEOUT&amp;quot; the report field is completed automatically after few seconds you have typed the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
      &#039;&#039;&#039;RUN mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
      The &amp;quot;ENTER SENDS MESSAGES&amp;quot;, better known as &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot;, is a choice to send CW/RTTY messages only using &amp;quot;enter&amp;quot; key.&lt;br /&gt;
      Functioning of this logic is according to cursor position.&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on empty call-field ESM will send &amp;quot;CQ&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on call-field with a callsign ESM will send CALL+RST. In this case you need to move cursor to RST field.&lt;br /&gt;
      Once in RST field is completed with data &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot; will send &amp;quot;TU&amp;quot; message and log the qso&lt;br /&gt;
      In case you don&#039;t have the correct information you must leave the RST field empty in order to send &amp;quot;NR?&amp;quot; message &lt;br /&gt;
     (typically on F6 memory) with &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      &#039;&#039;&#039;S/P mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
      While in S/P the functioning of &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot; is related to &amp;quot;S/P CW MESSAGES&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on empty call-field ESM will send S/P &amp;quot;F1&amp;quot; message.&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on call-field with a callsign ESM will send S/P &amp;quot;INS&amp;quot; message.&lt;br /&gt;
      To log the qso just hit &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+PLUS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=296</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=296"/>
		<updated>2014-12-25T20:26:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Data entry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REDEFINE KEYBOARD KEYS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a DXL command to any of the keys (or combination of keys) just using this feature. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the redefine window is opened just select from keyboard the new key (or combination) you want to have and then type the old key (or combination) that has the default DXL assigned command you want to move. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now DXL behave is the same as before but using different key(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field (not valid for serial #).&lt;br /&gt;
   *Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;PRESSING THE SPACE BAR&amp;quot; the report field is completed when you press the spacebar.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
   *Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AUTOMATICALLY&amp;quot; the report field is completed while you are typing the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   *After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AFTER TIMEOUT&amp;quot; the report field is completed automatically after few seconds you have typed the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
      The &amp;quot;ENTER SENDS MESSAGES&amp;quot;, better known as &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot;, is a choice to send CW/RTTY messages only using &amp;quot;enter&amp;quot; key.&lt;br /&gt;
      Functioning of this logic is according to cursor position.&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on empty call-field ESM will send &amp;quot;CQ&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
      If cursor is on call-field with a callsign ESM will send CALL+RST. In this case you need to move cursor to RST field.&lt;br /&gt;
      Once in RST field is completed with data &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot; will send &amp;quot;TU&amp;quot; message and log the qso&lt;br /&gt;
      In case you don&#039;t have the correct information you must leave the RST field empty in order to send &amp;quot;NR?&amp;quot; message &lt;br /&gt;
     (typically on F6 memory) with &amp;quot;ESM&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=295</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=295"/>
		<updated>2014-12-25T19:57:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Data entry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REDEFINE KEYBOARD KEYS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a DXL command to any of the keys (or combination of keys) just using this feature. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the redefine window is opened just select from keyboard the new key (or combination) you want to have and then type the old key (or combination) that has the default DXL assigned command you want to move. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now DXL behave is the same as before but using different key(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field (not valid for serial #).&lt;br /&gt;
   *Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;PRESSING THE SPACE BAR&amp;quot; the report field is completed when you press the spacebar.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
   *Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AUTOMATICALLY&amp;quot; the report field is completed while you are typing the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   *After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
      If your choice is &amp;quot;AFTER TIMEOUT&amp;quot; the report field is completed automatically after few seconds you have typed the call-sign.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=294</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=294"/>
		<updated>2014-12-24T11:38:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Redefine keyboard keys */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REDEFINE KEYBOARD KEYS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can assign a DXL command to any of the keys (or combination of keys) just using this feature. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the redefine window is opened just select from keyboard the new key (or combination) you want to have and then type the old key (or combination) that has the default DXL assigned command you want to move. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now DXL behave is the same as before but using different key(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field.&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=293</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=293"/>
		<updated>2014-12-24T11:32:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Redefine keyboard keys */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REDEFINE KEYBOARD KEYS&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field.&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=292</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=292"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T18:04:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Data entry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a specific database available for a specific contest, you can have different ways to pre-fill the report field.&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=291</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=291"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T17:32:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Repeat loop */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically restored when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=290</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=290"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:56:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Repeat loop */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n seconds (default is 3 seconds) and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop timing function is visible in &amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot; window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically activated again when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Repeat_time.jpg&amp;diff=289</id>
		<title>File:Repeat time.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Repeat_time.jpg&amp;diff=289"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:54:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=288</id>
		<title>Menu Tools</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Tools&amp;diff=288"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:36:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Repeat loop */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Tools&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Repeat loop==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Text command: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RPT / NORPT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menu: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;TOOLS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;REPEAT LOOP&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turns on or off CQ repeat loop function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After pressing F1 (CQ memory) and when message is transmitted, loop will wait for n sec and if there isn&#039;t any key pressed in qso callsign field (or esc key), after n sec period is exceeded, content of F1 memory will be transmitted again automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The setting time window appears like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:repeat.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat loop status function is visible in Rate window, if it is activated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also, if during transmitting of message any key is pressed in callsign qso filed (or esc key is pressed), transmit stops immediately and repeat loop is deactivated. It will be automatically activated again when F1 key is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Redefine keyboard keys==&lt;br /&gt;
==Data entry==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exchange guessing&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
   Pressing the space bar&lt;br /&gt;
   Automatically&lt;br /&gt;
   After timeout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable ESM mode&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ESM mode change focus on LOGGEDCALL macro&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Run/SP switching&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Automatic Run/SP selection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable CW Cut Numbers Translation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Message editors==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable SO2R scenarion on the fly editor&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On the fly editor focus on scenario line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Repeat.jpg&amp;diff=287</id>
		<title>File:Repeat.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Repeat.jpg&amp;diff=287"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:33:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Windows&amp;diff=286</id>
		<title>Menu Windows</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Windows&amp;diff=286"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:16:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Gab */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Windows&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Worked DXCC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+M&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Check callsign==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F9&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Check multipliers==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Check partials==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Check N+1==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F8&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Rate==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+R&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operating info==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Statistics==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F9&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gab==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+I&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window is a &amp;quot;pop-up&amp;quot; window. When a message is sent the window appears to a single correspondent, if you select one specific station to chat with, or to all connected computers. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the red circle you can see form which station on network is sending the chat.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be modify according to your needs in &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CONFIGURE NETWORK&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;STATION ID&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Status window==&lt;br /&gt;
Shrotcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+J&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Partner==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Radio/Ant status window==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Radio 1==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Radio 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Primary decoder Radio 1==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary decoder Radio 1==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Primary decoder Radio 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Secondary decoder Radio 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX-Cluster monitor==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+O&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX-Cluster announcements==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Clock==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SSB Bargraph==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Messages&amp;diff=285</id>
		<title>Menu Messages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Messages&amp;diff=285"/>
		<updated>2014-12-21T12:09:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Send a gab */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Messages&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send a gab==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+G&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can send a text message to all stations in network or you can choose which band to send according to the menu. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window is a &amp;quot;pop-up&amp;quot; window. When a message is sent the window appears to a single correspondent, if you select one specific station to chat with, or to all connected computers. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open or close the chat window the shortcut is &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ALT+I&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the red circle you can see form which station on network is sending the chat.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be modify according to your needs in &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CONFIGURE NETWORK&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; -&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;STATION ID&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=283</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=283"/>
		<updated>2014-12-18T19:31:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Live score */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus or using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SHIFT+ALT+F9 or F10&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to control speed to radio without focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info CW.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To exit press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ENTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ESC&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect yuor favourite node as &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node for packet cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node, &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DX CLUSTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;EDIT CONNECTION LIST&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A pop-up window will open, select the node from the list (or add a new one) and press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DEFAULT&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a different node from the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To be disconnected from cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To send commands to packet cluster node&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on one of the buttons you can send interrogation to cluster about last 10-50-100 spots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is possibility to set &amp;quot;additional&amp;quot; messages into an extra window that can be reached using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ALT+C&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CW/DIGI&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;MODIFY ADDITIONAL MESSAGES&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To send this messages you can open the window and press the button on the right side according to the message you need to send&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the shortcuts &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT+Fx&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, where Fx is the function key where the needed message has been stored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select your appropriate category:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:live_score_select_category.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you can decide how frequently you can send automatically your score:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:live_score_refresh_time.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you can enable automatic data posting to web-site:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:live_score_auto_posting.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer to send the score manually any time you wish you can desable &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;AUTO POSTING&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and just click on &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;POST NOW!&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=278</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=278"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:41:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* CW messages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus or using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SHIFT+ALT+F9 or F10&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to control speed to radio without focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info CW.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To exit press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ENTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ESC&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect yuor favourite node as &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node for packet cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node, &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DX CLUSTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;EDIT CONNECTION LIST&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A pop-up window will open, select the node from the list (or add a new one) and press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DEFAULT&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a different node from the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To be disconnected from cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To send commands to packet cluster node&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on one of the buttons you can send interrogation to cluster about last 10-50-100 spots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is possibility to set &amp;quot;additional&amp;quot; messages into an extra window that can be reached using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ALT+C&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CW/DIGI&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;MODIFY ADDITIONAL MESSAGES&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To send this messages you can open the window and press the button on the right side according to the message you need to send&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the shortcuts &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT+Fx&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, where Fx is the function key where the needed message has been stored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=277</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=277"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:19:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* DX cluster */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus or using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SHIFT+ALT+F9 or F10&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to control speed to radio without focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info CW.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To exit press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ENTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ESC&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect yuor favourite node as &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node for packet cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To set the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; node, &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPTIONS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DX CLUSTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;EDIT CONNECTION LIST&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A pop-up window will open, select the node from the list (or add a new one) and press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;DEFAULT&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a different node from the &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To be disconnected from cluster&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To send commands to packet cluster node&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on one of the buttons you can send interrogation to cluster about last 10-50-100 spots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=276</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=276"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:04:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* SO2R scenario selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2V (Single op 2 VFO&#039;s)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This selection allows you to use 2 different VFO as per 2 separate radios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TO DO THIS YOU NEED A RADIO WITH 2 SEPARATE RECEIVERS INCLUDED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT+#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=275</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=275"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:04:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to both radio (headphone Split) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2V (Single op 2 VFO&#039;s)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This selection allows you to use 2 different VFO as per 2 separate radios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TO DO THIS YOU NEED A RADIO WITH 2 SEPARATE RECEIVERS INCLUDED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=274</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=274"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:04:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2V (Single op 2 VFO&#039;s)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This selection allows you to use 2 different VFO as per 2 separate radios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TO DO THIS YOU NEED A RADIO WITH 2 SEPARATE RECEIVERS INCLUDED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=273</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=273"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T11:04:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the primary radio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2V (Single op 2 VFO&#039;s)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This selection allows you to use 2 different VFO as per 2 separate radios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TO DO THIS YOU NEED A RADIO WITH 2 SEPARATE RECEIVERS INCLUDED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=272</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=272"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:49:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Carrier */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus or using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SHIFT+ALT+F9 or F10&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to control speed to radio without focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info CW.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To exit press &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ENTER&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;ESC&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=271</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=271"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:48:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* CW speed */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus or using shortcut &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SHIFT+ALT+F9 or F10&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to control speed to radio without focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info CW.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=269</id>
		<title>Menu Commands</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Commands&amp;diff=269"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:41:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Keyboard mode */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Commands&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QSY==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next lower band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first lower band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 40m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on lowest allowed band, QSY will be on last band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 160m, usually it will make QSY to 10m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next higher band&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moves band on active radio to first higher band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you operate on 20m, this will make QSY to 15m.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If user is already on highest allowed band, QSY will be on first band on the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This means, if you&#039;re on 10m, usually it will make QSY to 160m.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Jump to band by text command&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that user can change band using text commands written in callsign QSO field on active QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done on two ways:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write band value&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 20 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Write exact frequency&lt;br /&gt;
For example, user is operating on 10m band. If user writes 14020.5 in callsign qso field and press enter, this will make QSY to 20m band and exactly on frequency of 14020,5 kHz.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change period==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For contest splitted in several time defined periods, this option is used to manually switch between periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Period can be change on active QSO and also on previous logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F10&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to one before.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #3, it will be changed in #2.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is #1, this action will change period number to last one. In previous example it will be #4.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Period after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will change period on active or edited QSO to next one.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if contest is splitted in four time defined periods and period in QSO is #2, it will be changed in #3.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If period is equal to last one, this action will change period number to #1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Change mode==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode before&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Mode after&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+F2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keyboard mode==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+K&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option activates CW keyboard mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After keyboard mode is on the screen, everything what user types in will be transmitted as CW/RTTY output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is usable for quick chat during the contest, if there isn&#039;t some usable messaged already defined in any of F message memory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW speed==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+V&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows user to quickly change CW keying speed on desired WPM value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In SO2R you have 2 separate settings for each radio. To control them just do command according to radio focus&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Carrier==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to tune the radio / amp.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Receive QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can type in receive QTC data in that window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Send QTC==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this menu option is chosen, additional pop-up menu will be opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can see/choose how many QTC&#039;s you are able to send and after selection you will have new window opened,&lt;br /&gt;
with QTC data which are ready for sending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DX cluster==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect default&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Connect other&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Talk&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spot==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F3&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled when DXCluster is connected or network is enabled.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After menu option is chosen (or shortcut pressed), it will display predefined text which will be sent to DXCluster as a spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Callsign is taken from active QSO callsign field or if it is empty from last logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CW messages==&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Msg F1..F7, INS, PLUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, INSERT, PLUS&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will transmit predefined messages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In CW/RTTY mode, messages are defined in textual format.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial content of all Fx memories are stored in contest configuration files.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This can be edited by user with shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SHIFT+Fx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; where Fx is memory which user wants to edit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For example, by pressing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Shift+F1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; content of memory F1 will be displayed and user can change it on some other value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Contents of all memories are saved together with DXLog.net contest log file, so, when user opens existing contest file, all memories will be active with last edited state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Operator login==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcuts: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;LOGIN/LOGOUT or OPON/OPOFF&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By this command you can put operator call-sign in Multioperator entry. This allow you to change some settings according to operator. For example you can play specific audio messages or setting a different keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station type==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can select what is the role of the position where the software is running.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to discriminate if you are running the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;RUN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position or the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;MULT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position in M/S entry or &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;R1/R2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in M2 entry or if it is just a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SUPPORT&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the sotware to work properly specially managing the correct QSY timing/move (10 minutes rule or band changing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Live score==&lt;br /&gt;
By this menu you can send your score &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; to appropriate web-site cqcontest.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Antenna selection==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change RX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F11&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change RX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected RX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Change TX&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F12&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to change TX antenna whenever it is pressed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Currently selected TX antenna is visible in Radio/Ant status window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow different RX/TX antenna, you need to enable this option in menu Options-&amp;gt;Interface specific options-&amp;gt;Allow different TX/RX antenna.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If this option isn&#039;t enabled, RX and TX antenna selection will be changed together.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=268</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=268"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:38:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Technique */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2V (Single op 2 VFO&#039;s)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This selection allows you to use 2 different VFO as per 2 separate radios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TO DO THIS YOU NEED A RADIO WITH 2 SEPARATE RECEIVERS INCLUDED&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=267</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=267"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:34:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to both radio (headphone Split) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=266</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=266"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:33:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=265</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=265"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:32:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the primary radio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have a visual information of the selection by opening &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will have an information like:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info R1R2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R2.jpg&amp;diff=264</id>
		<title>File:Operating info R2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R2.jpg&amp;diff=264"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:28:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R1R2.jpg&amp;diff=263</id>
		<title>File:Operating info R1R2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R1R2.jpg&amp;diff=263"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:28:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R1.jpg&amp;diff=262</id>
		<title>File:Operating info R1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info_R1.jpg&amp;diff=262"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:24:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=261</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=261"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:13:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* SO2R scenario selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:operating info.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This window shows which scenario is selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info.jpg&amp;diff=260</id>
		<title>File:Operating info.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:Operating_info.jpg&amp;diff=260"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:11:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=259</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=259"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T10:10:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* SO2R scenario selection */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;br /&gt;
There are some available scenarios in DXL but you still can make new ones and save them using a specific name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a tab in scenario editor window and play with it&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you are operating you may need to change scenario according to operative situations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can go to menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;OPERATIVE&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;SO2R SCENARIO SELECTION&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and choose one scenario from the pop-up window&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario selection.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use shortcuts to select the desired scenario using &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;CTRL+ALT*#&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; where # is the number corespondent to the scenario you want to have&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may need to see which scenario is loaded and which you are selecting using shortcuts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For this reason you may need to open &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Operating info&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; from menu &amp;quot;WINDOWS&amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&amp;quot;OPERATING INFO&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=257</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=257"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T09:52:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Technique */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;ARROW UP/DOWN&amp;quot; key&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:R1R2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:R1R2.jpg&amp;diff=256</id>
		<title>File:R1R2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=File:R1R2.jpg&amp;diff=256"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T09:49:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=255</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=255"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T09:36:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Edit SO2R Scenarios */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You need to enable this feature in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;TOOLS&#039;&#039;&#039;-&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;MESSAGE EDITORS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=254</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=254"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T09:23:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Edit SO2R Scenarios */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
Scenarios are available only if you select technique as &#039;&#039;&#039;SO2R ADVANCED&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; play using a SO2R machine like MICROHAM MK2R or EZMASTER&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The goal for a scenario is to have interactive automatic behave between the 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can control TX focus (which radio can TX) and RX focus (which radio you want to listen to).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The behave of each line is composed using a sequence of variables (called macro)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s see an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario2.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario in picture is called &amp;quot;ALTERNATE CQ&amp;quot;, it calls alternatively CQ on both radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you press F1 on R1 (primary radio):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Log cursor swaps to R2 call-field line (command $FOCUS2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Any possible audio choice activated by keyboard is deleted (command $RESET)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is switched to R2 on both ears (command $R2R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starts to send message saved on F1 memory i.e. CQ CONTEST (command $F1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RX focus (audio) is changed to R1 left ear and R2 right ear (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When F1 memory is completely sent it swaps again log cursor on R1 and starts TX F1 to R2 (command $ALTERNATECQ)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a caller and you start typing the callsign in log, after the CQ on opposite radio is sent, DXL recognize a filed is fill-in so it stops from cq-ing and give TX focus to the radio with callsing. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At this moment you can work the station by using &amp;quot;insert&amp;quot; key &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some preset scenarios available but you can modify any of them or set your own just using the available macro commands.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=253</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=253"/>
		<updated>2014-12-07T09:22:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Technique */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=251</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=251"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:27:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to both radio (headphone Split) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+S&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary and secondary radio each one to one side of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=250</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=250"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:27:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+L&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=249</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=249"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:26:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone while primary radio is in TX&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=248</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=248"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:25:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the primary radio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=247</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=247"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:25:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+T&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature brings your audio from your secondary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=246</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=246"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T13:24:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the primary radio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This feature bring your audio from your primary radio to both sides of your headphone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=245</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=245"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T11:52:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Listen to the primary radio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ALT+A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature can be used only if you select your &amp;lt;a&amp;gt;href=”http://dxlog.net/docs/index.php/Menu_Operating#Technique&amp;gt;Operating technique&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt; as SO2R or SO2R Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=244</id>
		<title>Menu Operating</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Operating&amp;diff=244"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T09:52:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Bandmap */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Operating&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Period autoswitch==&lt;br /&gt;
Some contests are splitted in couple of periods defined by time length.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In contest configuration file, it is possible to define this lengths and number of periods.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, DXLog.net automatically switch contest period in next one when time for active period elapses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bandmap==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;BANDMAP&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; is the window that shows possible call-signs available on band and you can open the window in &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;WINDOWS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; menu and select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or/and &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RADIO 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It is very useful in case of use of packet cluster because all spots received will be placed on map available for the next commands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add with SPACEBAR&lt;br /&gt;
By default, you can add new entry to bandmap by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+ENTER&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After callsign is added to bandmap, entry is cleared.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When this option is activated, new entry in bandmap will be created when spacebar is pressed on current QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, callsign isn&#039;t cleared.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select upper &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; upper call moving up into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first valid lower spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select lower &#039;&#039;&#039;valid&#039;&#039;&#039; call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+DOWN ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grab first upper spot&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039; lower call moving down into bandmap and grab it into call entry field by pressing &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technique==&lt;br /&gt;
This selects the category you are going to join and enable/disable software features according.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO1R/Multi op&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 1 radio or any Multi operators category.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options are &#039;&#039;&#039;DISABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Only one entry QSO line is enable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to primary radio&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+A&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+T&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to secondary radio during transmit &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+L&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear secondary radio audio on both ears while TX with primary&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Listen to both radios &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;Shortcut: &#039;&#039;&#039;CTRL+ALT+S&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
       &#039;&#039;You can ear primary audio in one ear and secondary radio audio in the other at same time&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     &#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two entry QSO line are enable, one controlling R1 and the other R2. You can swap between them using &amp;quot;*&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Caps lock&amp;quot; key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Advanced SO2R&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Must be selected if you are SO with 2 radios.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Headphone audio options menu is &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039; (same commands as per SO2R)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Special strings of command called &#039;&#039;&#039;SCENARIO&#039;&#039;&#039; are &#039;&#039;&#039;ENABLE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario string is a sequence of commands that can be sent to control radios behave and audio status automatically.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
It can be assigned to each Fx key both for R1 and R2.There are some &amp;quot;ready to go&amp;quot; scenarios or you can programm your own. To program scenario you must select the proper window in menu OPERATING -&amp;gt; Edit SO2R scenarios&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Scenario can work all modes: CW,SSB and RTTY.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
String can be composed by a logic of commands sequence that starts when pressing a Fx key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
An simple example of string can be:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:scenario.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Primary radio is not R1 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;with TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;, secondary radio is not R2 but is radio &#039;&#039;&#039;without TX FOCUS&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you press primary radio F1 you will have automatically switched left and right headphone ears on secondary radio audio (command $R2R2)in this case R2 then message of F1 start to play (command $F1) and, at the end of it, you have audio back to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to call a multiplier on R2, for example, you press F4 on secondary radio and you have:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to primary radio (command $R1R1) in this case R1 on both ears.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
F4 message starts to play (command $F4) on primary radio in this case R2&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Audio to secondary radio (command $R2R2) in this case R2 on both ears&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Change TX focus on secondary radio in this case R1 (command $STR2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Start to play additional message 1 set into ALT+C window such as &amp;quot;CQ TEST&amp;quot; to secondary radio in this case R1 (command: $MSG1)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When finished msg1 audio is switched R1 on left ear and R2 on right ear simultaneously (command $R1R2)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The variables to programm each string are: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRNR sends gr/num of the received QTC&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL sends QSO #&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGEDCALL send what&#039;s typed in callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $TR1 and $TR2 primary radio or secondary radio tx&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT, which grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $R1R1, $R1R2, $R2R1, $R2R2 which can be entered in the predefined CW messages to set the headphone&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT and $PLUS send messages behind ins or +&lt;br /&gt;
    $RESET cancels any manual change made in the audio control&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ) swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: additional CW messages (see Alt + C)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to exchange field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB work like hitting tab-key (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSZONE filling exchange field(s) if possible, but cursor remains in the same edit field&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE) mimics a space bar hit (filling exchange field(s)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CR works like hitting enter-key (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT Reset the automatic repeat mode interval&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT send a call correction, if any&lt;br /&gt;
    $F1...$F6 send the message associated with F1 ... F6 function key&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4 send QSOB4 message if the current QSO is a dupe&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECK: send license year (ARRL SS only)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CORRECT: sends a call correction, if any (see correction)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CURRENT (or $CURRENTCALL): Sends the callsign of the current QSO despite the presence of a $CR later in the message. The $CR (carriage return) is always executed on message keypress. It is also useful in ESM (Enter Sends Message) mode in lieu of $LOGGEDCALL.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQnn: Where nn is a band (e.g. $FREQ160, $FREQ80 etc.). Useful in a multi-op as a canned message &amp;quot;PSE QSY $FREQ15&amp;quot;. Sends the frequency of the primary radio of the first networked station found on this band with the following priority : R, R+, M, and M+.&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQP: contains the frequency of the primary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $FREQS: contains the frequency of the secondary radio (useful for passing mults)&lt;br /&gt;
    $INSERT: sends message in the [Ins] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $ISLAND: sends IOTA Reference (i.e. EU001, AF001, ...) (IOTA Contest)&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGGED (or $LOGGEDCALL): sends what is typed in the callsign field of the current QSO, or if blank, the previous QSO&lt;br /&gt;
    $MSG1...$MSG12: sends additional CW messages (see Modify additional messages)&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYCALL: sends callsign set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $MYNAME: sends operator name, set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXT (or $NEXTCALL): sends the callsign of the next QSO line when a $CR is included in the message.&lt;br /&gt;
    $NEXTSERIAL: sends next QSO serial number (current QSO serial number plus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $PLUS: sends message in the [+] key&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREV (or $PREVCALL): sends the callsign on the previous QSO line.&lt;br /&gt;
    $PREVSERIAL: sends previous QSO serial number (current QSO serial number minus 1)&lt;br /&gt;
    $QSOB4: sends the QSOB4 message and cancels the remainder of the current message, if the current QSO is a dupe, otherwise     sends nothing &lt;br /&gt;
    $RST: sends report from RST Sent field (normally 5NN)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SERIAL: sends current QSO Serial Number, or previous serial number if the line with the cursor is blank.&lt;br /&gt;
    $STATE: sends State/Province set in contest configuration (Exchange)&lt;br /&gt;
    $YEAR: sends year nr set in contest configuration (i.e. EUHFC, AA)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ZONE: sends zone nr set in contest configuration&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;amp;xy: sends a Morse prosign where xy represents the two characters forming the prosign, e.g. &amp;amp;AS, &amp;amp;AR, &amp;amp;BK, &amp;amp;BT, &amp;amp;CL, &amp;amp;KN, &amp;amp;SK, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
    +: increase speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    -: decrease speed by 4 wpm&lt;br /&gt;
    ^: the halfspace character with 1/2 dot duration&lt;br /&gt;
    ~: (tilde) at then end of a variable means &amp;quot;no space&amp;quot; will be inserted, e.g. $NEXT~? sends the next callsign followed by a question mark, with no space in between &lt;br /&gt;
    $CR: works like hitting [Enter] (log QSO)&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER: grabs the first callsign from the Partner window and inserts it in the callsign field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABSPOT grabs spot on the current frequency&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH (or $GUESSEXCHANGE): mimics a space bar hit, filling the exchange field(s) if possible, but the cursor remains in the same edit field.&lt;br /&gt;
    $REPEAT: restarts the automatic repeating CQ sequence (if enabled), after pausing for the specified interval. Most useful at the end of the [Plus] key message to avoid having to press [F1] to start CQing again.&lt;br /&gt;
    $RSTEXCHSENT: Resets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SETEXCHSENT: Sets the &amp;quot;exchangeSent&amp;quot; flag of the active QSO (useful only for ESM scripts)&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR: works like hitting spacebar-key (move cursor to the next most-used field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $TAB: works like hitting [Tab] (move cursor to next field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $ALTERNATECQ (or $ACQ): swaps primary and secondary radios and send CQ on the secondary radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $CQ: same as $ALTERNATECQ but does not swap radios&lt;br /&gt;
    $LATCH: sets latch mode&lt;br /&gt;
    $SPACEBAR    - same as $SPACE (press spacebar in currently active field)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CHECKCALL   - move focus to callsign and press spacebar&lt;br /&gt;
    $GUESSEXCH   - try to guess exchange, focus stays in currently active field&lt;br /&gt;
    $LOGQSO      - silently save QSO (useful in ESM + S&amp;amp;P mode)&lt;br /&gt;
    $CTRLPLUS    - same sa $LOGQSO &lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSCALL   - move entry focus to Callsign field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSRCVD   - move entry focus to Rcvd field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC1   - move entry focus to RecInfo field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC2   - move entry focus to RecInfo2 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUSREC3   - move entry focus to RecInfo3 field&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS1      - change Focused radio to Radio 1&lt;br /&gt;
    $FOCUS2      - change Focused radio to Radio 2&lt;br /&gt;
    $SWAPFOCUS   - change Focused radio to opposite Radio&lt;br /&gt;
    $GRABPARTNER - grab next call from partner window into callsign field in current entry line&lt;br /&gt;
    $MK2R=cmd: send a specific MK2R command to the microHAM MK2R SO2R box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All strings can be edited &amp;quot;on-the-fly&amp;quot; pressing &#039;&#039;&#039;Shift+Fx&#039;&#039;&#039; keys. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;All commands work if your are managing the 2 radios using machine like EZMaster or Microham MK2R+/MK2R/U2R&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the primary radio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone toggle)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to the secondary radio (headphone latch)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Listen to both radio (headphone Split)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit SO2R Scenarios==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SO2R scenario selection==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Edit&amp;diff=243</id>
		<title>Menu Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Edit&amp;diff=243"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T09:41:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Add QSO Note */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Edit&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Postcontest mode==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option activates postcontest mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, user enters QSO time manually. It&#039;s usable for writing QSO&#039;s from paper logs, after the contest.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Initially, date of first QSO is equal to current date. &lt;br /&gt;
User can change this with Edit QSO Date, Time option, and all QSO&#039;s entered in log after this action will be logged on that date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restore QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+Z&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will undo any changes made in current edited previous QSO in the log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Initialize QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F11 / ALT+W&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will erase all the fields in currently edited QSO. Initialize QSO option doesn&#039;t delete already logged QSO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add QSO Note==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+N&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Allows you to add some notes about currently focuses QSO. Notes are saved in plain text file and can be viewed with simple text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit QSO Date, Time==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to edit QSO date and time on previously logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;postcontest mode&#039;&#039;, you can set the date on current QSO which will be used for QSO&#039;s logged afterward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, in the log, you can change it to another date later if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Goto QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+G&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to to move into the log to a known qso number.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the window open put the number and press &amp;quot;goto&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Delete all QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This command will delete ALL qso in log.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;USE IT CAREFULLY!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Edit&amp;diff=242</id>
		<title>Menu Edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_Edit&amp;diff=242"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T09:40:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Add QSO Note */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:Edit&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Postcontest mode==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option activates postcontest mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this mode, user enters QSO time manually. It&#039;s usable for writing QSO&#039;s from paper logs, after the contest.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Initially, date of first QSO is equal to current date. &lt;br /&gt;
User can change this with Edit QSO Date, Time option, and all QSO&#039;s entered in log after this action will be logged on that date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restore QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+Z&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will undo any changes made in current edited previous QSO in the log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Initialize QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;F11 / ALT+W&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will erase all the fields in currently edited QSO. Initialize QSO option doesn&#039;t delete already logged QSO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add QSO Note==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+N&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to add some notes about currently focuses QSO. Notes are saved in plain text file and can be viewed with simple text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Edit QSO Date, Time==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ALT+F&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to edit QSO date and time on previously logged QSO.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;postcontest mode&#039;&#039;, you can set the date on current QSO which will be used for QSO&#039;s logged afterward.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Of course, in the log, you can change it to another date later if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Goto QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;CTRL+G&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to to move into the log to a known qso number.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the window open put the number and press &amp;quot;goto&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Delete all QSO==&lt;br /&gt;
Shortcut: NONE&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This command will delete ALL qso in log.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;USE IT CAREFULLY!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_File&amp;diff=241</id>
		<title>Menu File</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://dxlog.net/docs/index.php?title=Menu_File&amp;diff=241"/>
		<updated>2014-12-06T09:38:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ik2ncj: /* Quit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Menu:File&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==New==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option will create new DXLog.net contest file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; You need to give a name to file, choose a directory to save it and then a .dxn file will be created &amp;lt;/br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Open==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option will open existing DXLog.net contest file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Close==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option will closes currently opened contest file. User stays in DXLog.net environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can also do this typing &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;CLOSE&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in the call-field line&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you need to reload the contest file you can type &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RELOAD&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RELOADNOW&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in the call-field line&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RELOAD&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; will load the contest file showing the initial setting window, &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;RELOADNOW&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; will load the contest file directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this option you can import QSO data from different sources.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cabrillo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will create new DXLog.net file from existing Cabrillo log file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;EDI&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will create new DXLog.net file from existing EDI log file. This is commonly used format for VHF/UHF/SHF contests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ADIF&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This option is enabled only when previously created DXLog.net file is opened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can import QSO lines into active contest file from existing ADIF log file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export==&lt;br /&gt;
With this option you can export QSO data in different sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cabrillo&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will create new Cabrillo .log file from original DXLog.net file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ADIF&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This option will create new .ADI file from original DXLog.net file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quit==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option will exit DXLog.net and user will be returned to Windows environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can also do this typing &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;EXIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in the call-field line&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ik2ncj</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>